Top Banner
REPAIR MANUAL ELECTRONIC MODULES FOR USE WITH POLAROID LAND SERIES 300 AUTOMATIC SHUTIERS AUGUST 1972 - - POLAROID CORPORATION I REPAIR DEPARTMENT I CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS
52

Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

Feb 01, 2016

Download

Documents

wildkow
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

REPAIR MANUAL ELECTRONIC MODULES FOR USE WITH POLAROID LAND SERIES 300 AUTOMATIC SHUTIERS AUGUST 1972

-

-

POLAROID CORPORATION I REPAIR DEPARTMENT I CAMBRIDGE MASSACHUSETTS

---------------

-

-

INTRODUCTION I

This publication suppli~additional information required to repair automatic shutter Electronic Modus These $hutters and associated Electronic Modules are used in the Polaroid ~ries 300 Cameras 8$ shown in the following table

Camera Model

315 320 325 330 335 340 350

i Shutter

388 386 389 362 381 383 384

Module Type No

12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14-15 12-13-14-15

5 3middot 4middot 6- 9

10-11middot16

The manual which is to be used in conjunction with the Repair Manual on Automatic Shutters dated May 1968 is divided into four (4) sections

Section 1- Explains the principles of operation of the Shutters including both electrical and mechanical theory

Section II - Reviews information previouslV released on the Series 100 ard 200 Camera Shutters and notes the differences principally product improvements between the various shuttel1

setion III - Provides identification information for all the Electronic Modules used in the 300 Series Cameras and Shutters

Sect10n tV - Gives troubleshooting and repair procedures f()f Electronic ModulM including a Substitution Table which provides interchangeability data

--

TABLE Of CONTENTS-Title Page

- I PRINCIPLES Of SHUTTER OPERATION 1 A Mechanical Operatlon bull 1 B Electrical Action bull 3

II OIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS 9- A Similarities 9 B Differences 9 C Color Coding bull 9

1 Control Shutter Speed bull 9 2 Component Identification 10

D Shutter Aperture Operation bull 10 1 Shutter Model 384 11- a Aperture Wheel Operation It

b Scone Selelttor bull 11

III ELECTRONIC MODULES 13- A Module Oporation bull 13 S Module CIa$$ific3tion bull bull 13

1 Electronic Module Type t 13 2 Electronic MOdule Type 2 16 3 Electronic Module Type 3 18 4 Electronic Module Type 4 21 5 Electronic MOdule Type 5 24 6 Electronic Module Tvpe 6 25

-1 Electronic Module Type 7 26 B Electronic Module Type 8 29 9 Electronic Module Type 9bull 29

10 Electronic Module Type 10 30 11 Electronic Madute Type 11 bull 31 12 Electronic Module Type 12 32 13 Electronic Module Type 13 bull 35 14 Electronic Module Type 14 bull 37 - 15 Electronic Module Type 15 39 t6 Electronic Module Type 16 bull 40

IV TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR 41 A Testing 41

1 Resistors and Capacitors bullbull 41 a ResistorS 41 b Capacito~ bull bull 41

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors 41 3 Transistors bull 41 4 lotegtated Circuits (Ie) bull 42

B Interchanging MOdules bull 42 C Parts Information bullbull bull 47

1 Part In Stock 47 2 Pam and Assemblies No longer Stocked 47

-- LIST Of I~LUSTRATIONS

-----------

figure No

1middot1 1middot2 1middot3 14 1middot5 1-6 middot7 1middot8 1middot9 1middot10 2middot1 2middot2 2middot3 2-4 2middot5 3middot1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3middot8 3middot9 3middot10 3middot11 3-12 3middot13 3-14 3-15 316 3middot17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3middot21 3middot22 3middot23 324 3-25 3-26 3middot27 3middot2B 3-29 3middot30 3-31 3middot32 3-33

litle Page

Basic Shutter Components 1middotmiddot Cocking the Shutter bull 1middot middot middotmiddot Controlllng the Timing Switch 2 Cocking the Slide bull 2middot middot Tripping the Shutter 2middotmiddot middot Releasing the Opening Blade 3 Schematic 362 Shutter 4middot Magnet Holding Circuit 5middot middot capacitor Holding Circuit 5middot RC Timing CirctJit bull 6middot middot middot middot Type List of Electronic Modules 8 Photocell Color Chart 9middot Capacitor Color Codes 10middot middot Aperture Wheel Operation 11middot middot Capacitor Switch Rotor 11middot middot middot Top View Module Type No1 12 Bottom View Type 1 12middot middot middot middot E1ectrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 1 14 Schematic Type 1 middot middot middot middot middot 15 Top View Module Type No2 16 Bottom View Type 2 16middot middot Schematic Type 2 bull 17middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No3 18 Bottom View Type 3 18middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 3 bull 19 Schematic Type 3 middot middot middot 20middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No 4 middot 21middot Bottom View Type 4 21middot middot middot middot middot middot middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 4 22 Schematic Type 4 23middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No5 24 Bottom View Type 5 24middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type Noa 25 Bottom View Type 6 25middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No7 26 Bottom View Type 7 26middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 7 27 Schematic Type 7 2Bmiddot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No8 29 Top View Module Type No9 29 Top View Module Type No 10 30 Top View Module Type No1 t 31 Top Vew Module Type No 12 32 Bottom View Type 12 32middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 12 33 Schematic Type 12 34middot middot middot Top Vi Module Type NO 13 35 Bottom View Type 13 35middot middot middot middot middot

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONrOJ

F No

3-34 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-40 4middot1 4-2 4-3 4-4

Title

Schematic Type 13 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Top View Module Type No 14 bull bull bull bull bull Bottom View TVpe 14 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Electrical Velue amp Part Numbergt Type 14 Top View Module Type No 15 bull Bottom View Type 15 bullbullbullbull Top Vie Module Type No 16 Testing Resiston ~ Testing Transistors Testing Integrated Circuits Substitution Tabje

Page

38 37 37 38 38 38 40 41 42 43 44

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 2: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

---------------

-

-

INTRODUCTION I

This publication suppli~additional information required to repair automatic shutter Electronic Modus These $hutters and associated Electronic Modules are used in the Polaroid ~ries 300 Cameras 8$ shown in the following table

Camera Model

315 320 325 330 335 340 350

i Shutter

388 386 389 362 381 383 384

Module Type No

12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14middot15 12middot13middot14-15 12-13-14-15

5 3middot 4middot 6- 9

10-11middot16

The manual which is to be used in conjunction with the Repair Manual on Automatic Shutters dated May 1968 is divided into four (4) sections

Section 1- Explains the principles of operation of the Shutters including both electrical and mechanical theory

Section II - Reviews information previouslV released on the Series 100 ard 200 Camera Shutters and notes the differences principally product improvements between the various shuttel1

setion III - Provides identification information for all the Electronic Modules used in the 300 Series Cameras and Shutters

Sect10n tV - Gives troubleshooting and repair procedures f()f Electronic ModulM including a Substitution Table which provides interchangeability data

--

TABLE Of CONTENTS-Title Page

- I PRINCIPLES Of SHUTTER OPERATION 1 A Mechanical Operatlon bull 1 B Electrical Action bull 3

II OIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS 9- A Similarities 9 B Differences 9 C Color Coding bull 9

1 Control Shutter Speed bull 9 2 Component Identification 10

D Shutter Aperture Operation bull 10 1 Shutter Model 384 11- a Aperture Wheel Operation It

b Scone Selelttor bull 11

III ELECTRONIC MODULES 13- A Module Oporation bull 13 S Module CIa$$ific3tion bull bull 13

1 Electronic Module Type t 13 2 Electronic MOdule Type 2 16 3 Electronic Module Type 3 18 4 Electronic Module Type 4 21 5 Electronic MOdule Type 5 24 6 Electronic Module Tvpe 6 25

-1 Electronic Module Type 7 26 B Electronic Module Type 8 29 9 Electronic Module Type 9bull 29

10 Electronic Module Type 10 30 11 Electronic Madute Type 11 bull 31 12 Electronic Module Type 12 32 13 Electronic Module Type 13 bull 35 14 Electronic Module Type 14 bull 37 - 15 Electronic Module Type 15 39 t6 Electronic Module Type 16 bull 40

IV TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR 41 A Testing 41

1 Resistors and Capacitors bullbull 41 a ResistorS 41 b Capacito~ bull bull 41

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors 41 3 Transistors bull 41 4 lotegtated Circuits (Ie) bull 42

B Interchanging MOdules bull 42 C Parts Information bullbull bull 47

1 Part In Stock 47 2 Pam and Assemblies No longer Stocked 47

-- LIST Of I~LUSTRATIONS

-----------

figure No

1middot1 1middot2 1middot3 14 1middot5 1-6 middot7 1middot8 1middot9 1middot10 2middot1 2middot2 2middot3 2-4 2middot5 3middot1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3middot8 3middot9 3middot10 3middot11 3-12 3middot13 3-14 3-15 316 3middot17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3middot21 3middot22 3middot23 324 3-25 3-26 3middot27 3middot2B 3-29 3middot30 3-31 3middot32 3-33

litle Page

Basic Shutter Components 1middotmiddot Cocking the Shutter bull 1middot middot middotmiddot Controlllng the Timing Switch 2 Cocking the Slide bull 2middot middot Tripping the Shutter 2middotmiddot middot Releasing the Opening Blade 3 Schematic 362 Shutter 4middot Magnet Holding Circuit 5middot middot capacitor Holding Circuit 5middot RC Timing CirctJit bull 6middot middot middot middot Type List of Electronic Modules 8 Photocell Color Chart 9middot Capacitor Color Codes 10middot middot Aperture Wheel Operation 11middot middot Capacitor Switch Rotor 11middot middot middot Top View Module Type No1 12 Bottom View Type 1 12middot middot middot middot E1ectrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 1 14 Schematic Type 1 middot middot middot middot middot 15 Top View Module Type No2 16 Bottom View Type 2 16middot middot Schematic Type 2 bull 17middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No3 18 Bottom View Type 3 18middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 3 bull 19 Schematic Type 3 middot middot middot 20middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No 4 middot 21middot Bottom View Type 4 21middot middot middot middot middot middot middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 4 22 Schematic Type 4 23middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No5 24 Bottom View Type 5 24middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type Noa 25 Bottom View Type 6 25middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No7 26 Bottom View Type 7 26middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 7 27 Schematic Type 7 2Bmiddot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No8 29 Top View Module Type No9 29 Top View Module Type No 10 30 Top View Module Type No1 t 31 Top Vew Module Type No 12 32 Bottom View Type 12 32middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 12 33 Schematic Type 12 34middot middot middot Top Vi Module Type NO 13 35 Bottom View Type 13 35middot middot middot middot middot

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONrOJ

F No

3-34 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-40 4middot1 4-2 4-3 4-4

Title

Schematic Type 13 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Top View Module Type No 14 bull bull bull bull bull Bottom View TVpe 14 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Electrical Velue amp Part Numbergt Type 14 Top View Module Type No 15 bull Bottom View Type 15 bullbullbullbull Top Vie Module Type No 16 Testing Resiston ~ Testing Transistors Testing Integrated Circuits Substitution Tabje

Page

38 37 37 38 38 38 40 41 42 43 44

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 3: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--

TABLE Of CONTENTS-Title Page

- I PRINCIPLES Of SHUTTER OPERATION 1 A Mechanical Operatlon bull 1 B Electrical Action bull 3

II OIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS 9- A Similarities 9 B Differences 9 C Color Coding bull 9

1 Control Shutter Speed bull 9 2 Component Identification 10

D Shutter Aperture Operation bull 10 1 Shutter Model 384 11- a Aperture Wheel Operation It

b Scone Selelttor bull 11

III ELECTRONIC MODULES 13- A Module Oporation bull 13 S Module CIa$$ific3tion bull bull 13

1 Electronic Module Type t 13 2 Electronic MOdule Type 2 16 3 Electronic Module Type 3 18 4 Electronic Module Type 4 21 5 Electronic MOdule Type 5 24 6 Electronic Module Tvpe 6 25

-1 Electronic Module Type 7 26 B Electronic Module Type 8 29 9 Electronic Module Type 9bull 29

10 Electronic Module Type 10 30 11 Electronic Madute Type 11 bull 31 12 Electronic Module Type 12 32 13 Electronic Module Type 13 bull 35 14 Electronic Module Type 14 bull 37 - 15 Electronic Module Type 15 39 t6 Electronic Module Type 16 bull 40

IV TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR 41 A Testing 41

1 Resistors and Capacitors bullbull 41 a ResistorS 41 b Capacito~ bull bull 41

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors 41 3 Transistors bull 41 4 lotegtated Circuits (Ie) bull 42

B Interchanging MOdules bull 42 C Parts Information bullbull bull 47

1 Part In Stock 47 2 Pam and Assemblies No longer Stocked 47

-- LIST Of I~LUSTRATIONS

-----------

figure No

1middot1 1middot2 1middot3 14 1middot5 1-6 middot7 1middot8 1middot9 1middot10 2middot1 2middot2 2middot3 2-4 2middot5 3middot1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3middot8 3middot9 3middot10 3middot11 3-12 3middot13 3-14 3-15 316 3middot17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3middot21 3middot22 3middot23 324 3-25 3-26 3middot27 3middot2B 3-29 3middot30 3-31 3middot32 3-33

litle Page

Basic Shutter Components 1middotmiddot Cocking the Shutter bull 1middot middot middotmiddot Controlllng the Timing Switch 2 Cocking the Slide bull 2middot middot Tripping the Shutter 2middotmiddot middot Releasing the Opening Blade 3 Schematic 362 Shutter 4middot Magnet Holding Circuit 5middot middot capacitor Holding Circuit 5middot RC Timing CirctJit bull 6middot middot middot middot Type List of Electronic Modules 8 Photocell Color Chart 9middot Capacitor Color Codes 10middot middot Aperture Wheel Operation 11middot middot Capacitor Switch Rotor 11middot middot middot Top View Module Type No1 12 Bottom View Type 1 12middot middot middot middot E1ectrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 1 14 Schematic Type 1 middot middot middot middot middot 15 Top View Module Type No2 16 Bottom View Type 2 16middot middot Schematic Type 2 bull 17middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No3 18 Bottom View Type 3 18middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 3 bull 19 Schematic Type 3 middot middot middot 20middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No 4 middot 21middot Bottom View Type 4 21middot middot middot middot middot middot middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 4 22 Schematic Type 4 23middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No5 24 Bottom View Type 5 24middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type Noa 25 Bottom View Type 6 25middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No7 26 Bottom View Type 7 26middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 7 27 Schematic Type 7 2Bmiddot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No8 29 Top View Module Type No9 29 Top View Module Type No 10 30 Top View Module Type No1 t 31 Top Vew Module Type No 12 32 Bottom View Type 12 32middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 12 33 Schematic Type 12 34middot middot middot Top Vi Module Type NO 13 35 Bottom View Type 13 35middot middot middot middot middot

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONrOJ

F No

3-34 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-40 4middot1 4-2 4-3 4-4

Title

Schematic Type 13 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Top View Module Type No 14 bull bull bull bull bull Bottom View TVpe 14 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Electrical Velue amp Part Numbergt Type 14 Top View Module Type No 15 bull Bottom View Type 15 bullbullbullbull Top Vie Module Type No 16 Testing Resiston ~ Testing Transistors Testing Integrated Circuits Substitution Tabje

Page

38 37 37 38 38 38 40 41 42 43 44

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 4: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-- LIST Of I~LUSTRATIONS

-----------

figure No

1middot1 1middot2 1middot3 14 1middot5 1-6 middot7 1middot8 1middot9 1middot10 2middot1 2middot2 2middot3 2-4 2middot5 3middot1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3middot8 3middot9 3middot10 3middot11 3-12 3middot13 3-14 3-15 316 3middot17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3middot21 3middot22 3middot23 324 3-25 3-26 3middot27 3middot2B 3-29 3middot30 3-31 3middot32 3-33

litle Page

Basic Shutter Components 1middotmiddot Cocking the Shutter bull 1middot middot middotmiddot Controlllng the Timing Switch 2 Cocking the Slide bull 2middot middot Tripping the Shutter 2middotmiddot middot Releasing the Opening Blade 3 Schematic 362 Shutter 4middot Magnet Holding Circuit 5middot middot capacitor Holding Circuit 5middot RC Timing CirctJit bull 6middot middot middot middot Type List of Electronic Modules 8 Photocell Color Chart 9middot Capacitor Color Codes 10middot middot Aperture Wheel Operation 11middot middot Capacitor Switch Rotor 11middot middot middot Top View Module Type No1 12 Bottom View Type 1 12middot middot middot middot E1ectrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 1 14 Schematic Type 1 middot middot middot middot middot 15 Top View Module Type No2 16 Bottom View Type 2 16middot middot Schematic Type 2 bull 17middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No3 18 Bottom View Type 3 18middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 3 bull 19 Schematic Type 3 middot middot middot 20middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No 4 middot 21middot Bottom View Type 4 21middot middot middot middot middot middot middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 4 22 Schematic Type 4 23middot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No5 24 Bottom View Type 5 24middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type Noa 25 Bottom View Type 6 25middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No7 26 Bottom View Type 7 26middot middot

Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 7 27 Schematic Type 7 2Bmiddot middot middot middot middot Top View Module Type No8 29 Top View Module Type No9 29 Top View Module Type No 10 30 Top View Module Type No1 t 31 Top Vew Module Type No 12 32 Bottom View Type 12 32middot Electrical Values amp Part Numbers Type 12 33 Schematic Type 12 34middot middot middot Top Vi Module Type NO 13 35 Bottom View Type 13 35middot middot middot middot middot

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONrOJ

F No

3-34 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-40 4middot1 4-2 4-3 4-4

Title

Schematic Type 13 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Top View Module Type No 14 bull bull bull bull bull Bottom View TVpe 14 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Electrical Velue amp Part Numbergt Type 14 Top View Module Type No 15 bull Bottom View Type 15 bullbullbullbull Top Vie Module Type No 16 Testing Resiston ~ Testing Transistors Testing Integrated Circuits Substitution Tabje

Page

38 37 37 38 38 38 40 41 42 43 44

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 5: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONrOJ

F No

3-34 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-40 4middot1 4-2 4-3 4-4

Title

Schematic Type 13 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Top View Module Type No 14 bull bull bull bull bull Bottom View TVpe 14 bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull Electrical Velue amp Part Numbergt Type 14 Top View Module Type No 15 bull Bottom View Type 15 bullbullbullbull Top Vie Module Type No 16 Testing Resiston ~ Testing Transistors Testing Integrated Circuits Substitution Tabje

Page

38 37 37 38 38 38 40 41 42 43 44

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 6: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-I - PRINCIPLES OF SHUTTER OPERATION-

The simplest explanation of the way aU camem -work is a certain amount of Ught is allowed to fal on a photographic film for a certain amount

- of time The amount of light is controUed by the aperture (hole) in the camera shuuer The amount of time is controlled in the 300 Series Polaroid land Cameras by a photocell (electric eye) and - associated elelt[ronic circuitry When a shutter is operated the film is expO$ed to light and the

- Electronic Module measures the time of exposure thereupon permitting mechanical action to close the shutter after sufficient elapsed time

- Since the shutteB described in this manual are almost identical the following mechanical and electrical sequences win apply to all of them

A MECHANICAL OPERA nON--

I Four basic assemblies (Fig 1~1) fonn the autoshymatic camera shutter the aperture selector the opening blade the closing blade and the electronic module

-CLOSING

-

SELECTOR WliEfU

SLAOE

AffifnURE ELECTRONIC 1Cl~

-MOOULE

FIG1-1 BASIC SHUTTER MPONfNTS

2 The aperture seiector controls tbe light entershying the camera at any moment the opening blade begns the exposure the dosing bbde ends the exposure~ and the electronic module circuits regulate the length of exposure time

3 To operate the shutter must first be coltked by depressing the cocking arm (Fig I~J) As the arm moves it pulls the cocking slide which in turn pulls the opening blade to its opernting position While the opening blade moves it carries the closing blade along with it When the opening blade has been moved far enough a latch pin integral with it forces the blade latch down until the pin passes a shoulder on the latch As the pin slides beyond the latch shoulder the latch snaps up securing the pin and holding both shutter blades in the cocked position

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 7: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

4 WhiJe the shutter is uncocked the blade latch holds the timing swilOh (S2) open (FiJI I-n Cocking the shutter causes the 5eCUring of the latch pin and thereupon the blade latch allows the sptillll-Ioaded timing witch to close an acshytion necessary to start electronic circuit functions

TIMING SWITCH (S2)

A further push on thC cocking arm Jatches it in th~ o leu pOSltion (Fig 141

~ Whn lt0 wcured the ovefravel arm is butted flrmh qunlt1I the shoulder of the cocking pin lD turn orlng he clOsing blade tightly against Ih~ vqh~r ot the electromagnet With the overshyIrJ~iJfnt Iok~u the associated spring is ~lr~middotmiddothuL AI thl pOInt the shutter is cocked Ih~ Itllrlnl 10111 hl omplcted by the return to rmiddot~l rn1l1lt1ll nl Ill trained spring

middotlnpllll J~IHln 1q1 I-II~ begun by pushing ()~ Ill dlUUr fvlI hutlOn This is part ofa ~J~Imiddot j ~middotr vll 1mO Ih hody orth Carnshyer htfl tlw hUHnn I~ ptLSSCO the shuttershyrd ~ l h loro gt1JlnSt the battery switch lSI jIltII1~ It J110 tnpplnj th~ ~Iidt latch q(jlfi~ SJ ~Ompkhlt the tircliit operates the ltkdFIIlll ~ 11111 nllw lokI- Ih doinf blade

ARM

RM

SHUTTERltJf-- REt-EASE

8ATTliflY SWITCH IS

MAGNET

BUTTON

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 8: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-7 When the slide latch is tripped the cocking slide 2 The mechanical action of aU the Shutters

releases as the cocking slide returns to its rest - position a roller contacts a tang on the blade latch and forces the blade latch down (Fig l~) This action first releases the opening blade - and it snaps into position aUowing light to pass through exposing the film secondly pennits the blade latch to open switch 52 Opening 52

- initiates the electronic measurement of the amount of light and time to which the film is being exposed The photocell uses the average scene light to control the flow of current through- the liming circuit When the proper time deshypending on fUm selected and aperture size has elapsed the magnet current is cut off ThiS reshyleases the closing blade which rapidly snaps back -and shuts off the light completing the mm exposure-

------

8 The above action also fires the flash gun when (ine is used_ The combination (Fig lw2) of X~ - make X~break X~contact X--connecter and Rash saftty switches controls the firing of the flam

B ELECTRICAL ACTION

I Electrical action is initiated controlled timed - and terminated by the Electronic Module subshyassembly of the shutter Mechanical action as previously described is part of the overall electromechanical action_ Switches must first be opened or dosed in predetermined sequence in order to start the electric circuits functioning

3

concerned here is virtually identical The elelt tneal action is aiso the same as far as basic pur~ pose is concerned the time and quantity mea~ surements of light But increasing sophistica~ tion of design and employment of miniaturized components has led to the developmenl of many different electronic modules

3 Electrical action will be described in detail with respect to the ultimate purpose of the circuitry but without concentration on the specifiC uses of components The following section (Section Ill) wiJl present detailed information including identification and sufficient other data to per~ mit field use of any Electronic Modules stOCked This contributes to economical customer repairs

4 The basic eJectronic circuit is a two (2) rransistor trigger it uses a photocell to control the length of time that a small electromagnet is energized (Fig 1-5) Power for the circuit illustrated (Fig w 7) is obtained from a 45 volt bauery Later modules use a 3 vol t type power source

5 Electrical action requires the closing of switches S2 Grst~ and then S 1 the battery power switch 51 is closed by pressing the shutter release button When SI operates power is applied simultaneousshyly to two (2) circuits 1) the electromagnet holdshying circuit and 2) the capacitor by-pass circuit In the first circuit current flows from the battery (Schematic Fig 1-7) through SI to one terminal of the coil of the electromagnet M and through RI to the base of transistor Q2

As the voltaampe on the base of Q2 increases the NPN transistor turns on because Emitter to Base electronic current flow begins With Q2 on current now flows through the coil of the magnet M completing this circuit and holding the closing shutter blade OPEN See diagram Fig 1-8 for a representation of the described current now_

In the by-pass circuit current flows (Ft 1-9) from the battery through S I photocelJ LDR reshysistor R6 and S2 to the other side of the battery This completes this cjrcuit and by-passes the com~ ponents noted on Fig 1-9 just sO long as S2 reshymains clOsed

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 9: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--------S3 _ A Ie -He I R

R L------~R3I

R

+

R 4JSV 1_

LOR

I 1=- ~

R7

FIG1-7 SCHEMATIC 362 SHUTTER

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 10: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-7 When 51 is closed and the shutter simultanshy components Since direct current cannot flow

eously tripped the blade latch opens 52 With through capacitors the function now changes- S2 open the timing circuit by-pass is removed to voltage which charges the capacitor or reshyand timing begins Current now flows through sistorcapacitor combination selected by rotor SI photocell LOR and the selected timing switch 53 on the reverse of the aperture wheel -

-----

-+ BATTERY

s

FIG middota MAGNET HOLDING CI RCUIT

-BYPASSES TIMING CIRCUITRYINCLUDING Cl THRU C4 R4middot RSmiddot R7middot RS

-ttB-4 BATTERY

s S2

CAPACITOR BYPASS CIRCUIT

FIG middot9 CAPACITOR HOLDING CI RCUIT

5

--eg PHOTOCELL

BATTERY

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 11: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

8 With for example capacitor CI (Fig HO) being charged the charging rate wiD be detershymined by the amount oflight triking the LDR The photocell now acts as a variable resistance if the light shining upon it is dim its resistance wiD be high it wiD pass less CUmllt and the Rc time wiD be longer Consequendy slowshying the closing of the shutter and allowing more film expOSUre time~ In the same manner various combinations of RC circuitry~ workin with the selected aperture wheel openings win produce various rime delays With Q2 orr the magnet can nO longer grip the shutter dOlr ing blade so the blade snaps back closing off the light and completing the exposure

FIG 110 Re TIMING CIRCUIT

9 The rmaJ action to complete film exposure and reset the camera for the next pictureshytaking operation is remoyaJ of pressure on the shutter release button This happens very quickly Sl opens and all power is off Reshycocking of the shutter before the next picture discharges CI and all components ready for the next sequence

NOTE In tltelash operation switch S (Fig 1-]) Is campned when the shutter Is cocked while at the same time switch 51 is allowed to open When the hutter Is ttpped the ope~ Mzde cJom S1 S being heJd closed because the nIJI net circuli Is Immobilizing the clori1lll _e

IHOTOCELL 52 OPEN IBREAICS BYP_I

~~((~-+middotI ~~-q ( BATniRY

51

fti R24 laquo([[~ -ltff[((((shy

L--1~ ~ Cl CHARGINGI

01 01

~~J~~--Creg---J 1----bullbull ~ Ql ON TURNS Q2 Off RELEASING MAGNET HOLD

COLLECTOR

02 OFF

6

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 12: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-- Both swUches closed activates the Model 268

14sh gun ifone Is plugged il1 otherwise when the magnet is deenergized S opens and breaks - the continuity ollhe flash circuit there is thl4 no wnger possibility of a preTMture ruing of the f4sIt

-

-

--

-----

7

to 54 of the schematic is a flash compensation switch Inserting the flash gun probe causes 54 to open thu$ placing R4 in series widl C3 and R7 in series wi[h C2 consequently increas-shying the charging times of C2 and C3 Increasing these RC times overcomes the tendency of the Shutter to dose 100 quickly because of the inshytense light from the flash

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 13: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

I

~

FIG 2 I TYPE LIST OF ELECTRONIC MODULES I Type Shunt CillI1ltd ~~~~~~r~m I T~~ I~~~~--- - Semiconductor ItImoo ~---

1 gm flAtI_ Transistor Ofgltw01 7 361 250 ~~~___ _____ Tfansi$tOf C5 addbd to TYpe 1

~ - -_ shyJS(1 HAND Transistor R9 added to Type 2 J 364 384 ~O _ ___ HAND integrated Cireuit OrioinallC Tvpe

5 ~83 _ __ _ __A4fL __ Automahc Trf$isttif Auto _titan of TVpe 1

(i JB4 3S0 Automatic Tran5istor Auto wnion of Type 3 c----- -- ----1-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot- - - ~ ______ 374 ___ 2(H___ _ HANQ______ Transistor CldeletedfromType2

~_____ _ 362 __ HID __ ___ _____ H~ND TrartsittOl 1 092 Tr80listor inTVDampl

9 384 350 HAND Tremistor IQ~I~~~I~~JIlType3

10 384 350 Automatic Traos~tor R9location to between AaampOl

II 384 3SJL______ r AutOmatic TransistOr R91s Pad on reverse R3

12 366 103________ HAND Transistor Original 13 366 103 HAND TranSinot C2 added to Type 12 I

14 38e 32fL _____ I-- Automatic Tr8n$lltor Auto Version of Type 12 I 15 386 32L~~~~~ Automatic traniistOf C2 added to typo- 14

16 384 35Q~~~~~ HAND__________ ~~srllted Circuit IC In second location and R9 deleted

I---+----f--- 1-1--1----1--4-----1---4----------1 I---+----f--- 1-1-1------1-4-----+--1--------

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 14: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-II - DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS -

This review includes 100 200 find 300 Series Cameras -A SIMILARITIES- t The mechanical operations previously explainshy

ed apply generally to all the shutters with slight differences to be herein described Because the- Model 362 Shutter is the original and all others are variations and improvements on that shutshyter the previous discussion in Section J is basicshyally a fu11 treatment of the Mode1362 Shutter-If more precise and detailed mechanical action knowledge (assembly and disassembly) is deshysired refer to the Repair Manual on Automatic- Shutters Models 362 366 and 374 published May 1965

-8 DIFFERENCES

I From Ie Model 362 to the Mode13S9 Shutters -the main difference is not mechanical it is elecshytrical The mode1385 Shutter is fully explainshyed in the Model 360 Camera Repair Manual so - it will not be considered in these instructions

By virtue of changing and adding or subtl3cting components the integral Electronic Modules have been refined so that approximately sixshyteen (16) varieties now exist The variations- for the most part are minor bUt the physical pIacement of components on the board the size and number the identifyIng color codes and the different flexible circuit solder points- are possible problem factors The changes were occasioned by other changes in the cameras themselves $Uch as adding an electronic timer etc

2 To provide an answer for this problem and to-make it possible to substitute one module for any or all of the others is the purpose of this manual The method to be followed is an exshy- haustive deveopment of all significant infonna~ tion about tne modules an arbitrary numbershyjng to be applied as a positive means of Type identification and separation and finally preshycise directions as how to economically convert from one type to anotber wbere interchangeshyability is simple and feasible-

9

3 The Table Fig 2-1 shown on opposile page is a compilation of the information presently available on aU electronic modules now or previously used on the automatic shutters for pack cameras

The remarks column briefly describes tbe changes made The text develops the differences in more detail and will indicate which modules are interchangeable and what~ if anything has to be done to them) to substitute one type for another

C COLOR CODING

I Control SIIul Speed

a Color coding of transisto~ photocells capacishytors and resistors is used for two (2) purposes One is to positively identify a component for ease of replacement The other is 10 systemshyatize replacement of components when shutter speed is to be increased or decreased Use the color code to go up or down in speed These coJor codes are used only for photocells and C3tHCitOrs The photoceU color chart is illusshytrated in Fig 2w2 Capacitors use exactly the

aLUB aLACK RBa VBLLOW GRBaN WHITa ORANGB

FIG 2middot2 PHOTOCELL COLOR CHART

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 15: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

same colors but the fast slow direction is reshyversed A photocell of the same color as the one replaced generally solves a problem of inshycorrect trigger voltage If it is necessary to use cells of a different rating go down in colorshyfrom blue to black - etc to increase shutter speeds go up in color - from orange te whiteshyetc to deere_ shutter speeds

b Further shutter speed control is possible by changing capacitance values Use the same scheme Fl 2~2 but reverse the directions eg go up in color - from orange to white shyetc to increase shutter speeds go down in color - from blue to black - etc to decrease shutter speeds

2 Component Identification

a Color coding of components solely for ease of replacement and identification is more complex The method used originally on the 362 shutter is illustrated in Fig 2-3 and explain-shyed as follows capacitors the first stripe (neal est the positive lead) is used to denote the color group to which the capacitor belongs the seshycond stripe indicates its schematic reference designation - C I C~ etc Resistor color bands are industry standard indicating resistance values and toferance percentages

b Unfortuna(ely this type of component color coding did not remain constant with product improvement and other engineering changes ~ew styli c4pacitofS are used in subsequent models and ltecro additional ways of coding wcftdeised - wHh the flnal method being th pnnlmg of the )clUai capacitance value in

microfarads on the side of the component On these types the rounded end indicates the posj tive lead When a problem exists because of strange or mixed color coding reference rnuampt be made to the associated Electrical Value Table (EVT) See Fig 3-3 while reading _ph c following

c The color wigned to the photoce1l is goveminJ road the table homontally belinning with the first column photoce1l cOOelot ZABCDEF and continuing to the riampbt The color codes as wen as the component parameter value is given Simply replace the faulty part with bull piece of the same numerical value lOmicroshyfarad capacitor etc The photocen cap8(litor and resistance values are au interdependent and so grouped

D SllUITER APERTURE OPERATION

Refer to the Manual on Shutter Operation for bull complete description of the operation of the aperture wheel on the 362 Shutter

The identical information applies to the Shutters tabulated in Fig 2-1 Also the same information applies to tneType 366 Shutter This manuol is concerned with the mechanical and elexUical ltfP eration of shutters not previously covered in the aforementioned document basically the 384 Shutter along with the 383 and the 386 Since the 384 is the mQSt complex it will be the only type discussed

SLACK C1 REO C2 amp C3 GREEN C4

d ~1I1- n Dill _J 4UDIII +

-u I Cl u - C2~amp~C~3~~7~_1__________ ______tL-l_________ 1_---- -f 1 IC4

COLOR GROUP

FG 23 CAPACITOR COLOR CODES 10

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 16: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

I Shutter Model 384

a AJIer Wheel Operation

L The only additional mechanical information needed is aperture wheel utilization There are eight (8) holes (apertures) in the wheel arrant ed in sets of two (2) one large one small each set is used for one of four different film speeds Manual rotation of the aperture wheel positions - one of the sets of openings in front of the shutshyter ~ the other aperture of the set is selected by the scene selector slider (Fig 2-4) A detent block and spring stops the aperture wbeeJ after each turn and a readout actuator and actuator detent spring secures the wheel at each position -

-ACTUATOR OETENT OETENT BLOCt(

-----

SCENE SELECTOR SUCER

APERTURE WHEEL

FIG2-4 APERTURE WHEEL OPERATION

- There are four (4) exposure time circuits when - fhe same light level is used in testing Under

actual use conditions the photocen is an in~ finitely varying resisrance and the range of - exposure times is unlimited Connection to each of the Resistor-CapacitoT (Re) time cirshycuits is made by a four (4) position switch Tot(Jf (S3) molded into the reverse of the apershy- ture wheel Fig 2-5

-11

COMMON

3 As the wheel is rotated throuylt the various aperture positions the capacitor witch rotor connects the contacts on one of four (4) comshybinations The combination connected through the rotor selects the RC circuit which will be used in shutter timing

lbe values of the capacitors are diff~rent their charging rates vary the photoceU resistance varies with the light falling on it and finaUy lixed resistance values are selected according to RC timing needs~ The combination of these factors determines exposure times of the shutters

b __IOI

I The Scene Selector slider selects one of the two (2l available anertures at each setting of the wheel lbe smaller aperture of eech set of two is used forth fastest films IASA3000 B amp WI

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 17: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

USH SOCKET

o o

C2

o

FIG 3-1 TOP VI EW MODULE TYPE NO1

FIG3middot2 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 1

11

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 18: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

- III - ELECTRONIC MODULES

-A MODULE OPERATION

t The Electronic Module is the heart of the e1ectricweye automatic exposure shutter The -basic principle of operation of all shutters is identical - both mechanically and electrically_ The idea is to open the shutter allow it to reshymain open exposing the rdm and shut it at a precisely measured time increment The shutshyter opens and closes at the precise time requi- ed by the light conditions and the type of film available The operator has only to select the type of film bein used and set the scene selecshy- tor the rest is completely automatic

2 The following is a compilation and analy~is of infonnation necessary to repair or replace com~- pOnents in any of the Electronic Modules used in all Cameras of the 100200 or 300 Model Series

3 The data is presented as roll~ the assi~ed Module Type number a top view of componshy

- ent layout a bottom view of the boord showshying solder connections an Electrical Values Table with part numbers and an Electrical Scbematic to facilitate troubleshooting and- circuit tracing

4 Many of these modules are now out of rroduc~ tiOn and are not stocked However with the-

--

data herein a satisfactory repair may he made by using a commercial equivalent if the Polamiddot roid part is not availab1e Thit I-ill experlite repair and permit of component rcplaccITlL rather than more costly module exchlnjc saving both time and money

S Seven (7) of the siltteen (16) type of dodules previously tabulatedt may be used inl J1it4

Shutter - types 3~4- 6 - 9 10- 11 td I These will he covered and exp1ain~( 11111 in the following breakdown of ElectrnRllt Modules befinning with Type 1 tbe ori2inal 362 Shutter module

B MODULECLASSmCATION

1 _nic Module Type I

This(F~ 3middot1 3-2) is the rust module to U in tbe original pack camera and is included here lor comparison and reference only Complete inf(lr~ mation~ including electrical and mechanic timcshylions is available in the Repair Manual for 362 366 and 374 ShutteB published in May 1968 The Eeetricd values (PM3meten) of the compotl~ ents are tDven in the foltowng uble (Fig J3l The electrical Schematic is shown in Fip 3-4

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 19: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

j

FIG3middot3 ELECTRICAL VALUES 8t PART NUMBERS TYPE 1

Photocell RMillort C81clton VUII in Ohm Vatu In Mtcroflf8dt

Vlul in Cl C2 C3 C4 SchematiC Rei LDR K Ohms RIRJ R2 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 MinIMu Min - MlnMlllII--shy -Pari Number 155249 ~n Pi5153 165149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 165146 165141 155148--__----shy --

Lalol Group Color Nole 1 -shyZ Blue 1511 1720 10K 1800 68K 120 3300 120K 191 220 203 233 140 180 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 3300 120K 220 252 233 28B 160 186

8 Rd 1150 1319 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212

C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 338 307 363 2-2 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 68 2200 82K 338 388 353 406 243 279

E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 62 1800 68K 388 440 405 466 279 321

F Orange 660 759 10K 6BO 27K 51 1500 56K 440 504 465 634 321 389

-shy

rnsiltOf _-Sehemnic Ref 01 02

Part Number 152553 152552

HFE (BETAI 200 001300II -

1-shy -shy

NOTE I RIR3s a If1PlIf7IlS insert board RI variable 65 to 80 Oh R3 vrlable 0I42K 0hmI -NOTE 2 Capairor C2 and C3 ate kJenricBl Hllveme MinIMax Bluft

- NOTE 3 The fix (6J digit numbers are Polaroid Part NumbMI

-

--shy

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 20: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--

------

--

--

+

-

gt ~Ij- I

E

-~A ~

0

-gt

r ~

shya

1 ) i

a

r

I

bull

-

shy N ~

U

ushy I Itshyf

w

~ U laquo iii w

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 21: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

2 _it Module Type 2 Values and Part Numbers lin used The slightlyThis Type (Figs 3middot5 3-6) is identiad to Type 1 changed Electrical Schematic is shown in Fig 3-7_pl that C5 - 05 microfarad - is added in The part number for the added C5 is 155162parallel to the llIet coiL The Ie Electriad

FIG3-6 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO2

FIG 3-6 BOTTO~l View TYPE 2

Ii

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 22: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-gt l

+ 11 I -~

I E ii2S N- L ~ ( )-----

a c -

-

N - a r

I I

I I

a

U

I

t I Oft----1

L-________________________________________________~~

17

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 23: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

COMMON

BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 3 FIG39

18

3 _n Module Type 3

This Is the first Electronic Module designed specifically for the 384 Slrutter in the Model 3S0Camerl(Figs 3-83-9) The Type 31s hand assembled and yirtually identical to Type 2 The difference is the addition of resistor R9 shy39 ohms - electrically psallello polentiometer RJ This rcslstor used with bull three (3) yolt power source reduces the resistance of Rl thus pennitting more cmonl now througb the transistors

b This ciJltuit change brougbt aboul by usbrg alifty_en (51) ohm magnet coil in some

Shutters particularly the 366 in the Model 100 and 200 Series and in the 384 Slrutters of the Model 300 Series Cam

In summary th are tbre (3) cbaRges from the original Type 1 The transistors are differshyent changed from the melallic can type as 10 a plastic encapsulated package - TO 92 size and both C-S and R9 are added In this case as in Type 2 Electrical Values and IIut Numbers are the same except as noted (Fip 3-10 3-11)

FUSH SOCKE T

VIEW MODULE TYPE NO3

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 24: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--

--

-0

I ( I (I I I I I

FIG3middot10 ELECTRICAL VALUES amp PART NUMBERS TYPE 3

Photocell AelilCon Capacitors

Values in Ohms Valul in Microfarads Value In Cl C2 C3 C4

Schematic Ref LOR Kohmo R1R3 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 MinMax Min Ma MinMal(-Part Number 278841 146777 155153 155149 155150 155151 155152 160408 155145 L15ll46 155147 155148

Color Group amp Color Note 1

Z Blue 1511 1720 191 20310K 1800 68K 120 3300 20K 220 233 140 160 A Black 120K 2201320 1510 10K 1500 56K 100 25213300 233 268 160 185 8 Rd 1150 1J 19 10K 1200 47K 91 2700 lOOK 252 290 268 307 185 212 C Yellow 1000 1149 10K 1200 47K 82 2200 82K 290 332 307 353 212 243 D Green 870 999 10K 1000 39K 2200 82K68 332 382 353 405 243 279 E White 760 869 10K 820 33K 180062 68K 382 440 405 465 279 321

759 10K 680 27K 51 1500F Oran~ 660 56K 440 504 465 534 321 369

Transistor

Schematic Ref Ql Q2 C5 R9 -Part Number 270766 270767 270629 05 ufs) 252769 390hms

Color Code

White HFE lSelal 200 Min

Range

Brown HFE (Bela)

Range 200300

NOTE R 1RJ i a separate insert board R 1 varisble 6580 ohms RJ vsrisble 042 K ohm bull NOTE 2 CafJllClror C2 and CJ are identical Hsve same MinMax values

1---shy --- r-----shy-

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 25: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

+ III I

III 11

______-

~A At

(

~ -

I U

- gt gt

a

~

Y

l

1f

I gt tl I

I

1---1 U

20

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 26: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-4 EIoctronlc Module Type 4

(12) mounted on the print circuit board Resistors This Module incorporates the first IntegrJted R 1 - R2 - R3 and capacitor C5 are eliminated - Circuit (Ie) (Figs 3-123middot13) Using an Ie reshy Electrical Values and Part Numbers (Fig 3~14) and duees the number of discrete components to twelve Schematics (fig 3~15) are also changed

-

------

o

o

FiG3middot12 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO4

-

---

COMMON

FIG 1 OMVI Y 4 21

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 27: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

FIG3middot14 ELECTRICAL VALUES Be PART NUMBERS TYPE 4 ------- Photocell Resistors- shy

Values in Ohms-Valuen Cl

Schematic Ref LOR K Ohms R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 MinIM Part Number 278841 155149 156150 156151 156152 160408 252769 155145

Color GrouD amp Color

A Brown S6K 200K 360 82K JOOK 47 073 083

8 Blue 1514 1740 47K IBOK 300 B2K 300K 47 083 096 C Black 1320 1614 36K leOK 270 6aK 240K 47 096 110

0 Red 11SO 1319 36K 15aK 240 S6K 200K 47 110 126 E Yellow 1000 1149 JOK 130K 200 S6K 200K 47 126 145

F Green 870 999 27K lOOK 180 47K 180K 47 145 167

G White 760 869 22K 62K 150 39K lOOK 47 167 191

H Oranoe 660 759 lo8K 68K 120 33K 120K 47 191 220 I Violet ISK 56K 100 33K 120K 47 220 262

Integrated Circuit

Part Number 251452

NOTE f C2 ampC3 are identical Have same MinMax values

CIIlton Vu in Mlcroflred

C2 C3 C4 Min M MinIMax

155146 155147 165148

769 883 531 611

883 101 611 700

101 117 700 6D6

117 134 606 925

134 154 926 106

154 177 106 122

117 2D3 122 138

2D3 235 138 157

236 268 157 181

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 28: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

----- -------

I I I I I I I I I I I I

tj

v fie

~ =~- =~-CCac C2

2

)R4gt~R4

FIG3middot15 SCHEMATIC TYPE 4

53

A~

V fl bull

5

~~ V~

tOR

Re 1-- ~

BIe 3V -

-3 -FCOMMON ~ - shy

6 ~ 4

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 29: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

S Eleetronic Module Type 5 tors are here positioned on opposite sides of the

This Module is identical to the original Type I printed circuit board they are also the mailer but it is a machine assembly Consequently a size TO 92 plastic encapsulaled versltlns new flexible circuit (Figs )16 3-17) is also used The physical sile and location of the transistors Electrical Vldue and schematic number is identic is also changed as tbe top view shows the transis- to Type L

FLASH

FIG3middot16 TOP VI W M DULE TYPE NO5

FLASH

PIN

FIG317 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 5

24

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 30: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-6 Electronic Module Type 6

Table (Fig H 0) and Schematic (Fig 3middot11 las This is identical to Type 5 but has added CS and Type 3 - R9 with two (2) TO 92 type platic (fig 3-8 molded transistors thus rna king it an auto version This is a 384 Shutter module so observe power of Type 3 It also uses the same flexibie circuit supply and magnet coil information tpplkble to- (fig 3middot19) as Type 5 the same Electrical Values Type 3

-

--

--

R3 RI

FLASH SOCKpoundT

FIG3-18 TOP VIEW MODULE TYP NO6

---

FIG3middot19 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 6 2S

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 31: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

7 Electronic Module Type 7 removed (Figs 3-20 )21) The Electrical Values (Fig 3-22) and Schmatic (Fig 3-23) also changelhis is used with the 374 Shutter and is identical and are shown in the figures noted to the Module Type 2 but has the CJ capacitor

o PHOTO CFlCshy

C2

FIG 3-20 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO7

FLASH

COMMON

FIG 3middot21 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 7

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 32: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

bull bull bull I I I I I I I I I I I

N

F10I-22 ElEClRICAL VALUES PART NUMBERS TYpe 7

Photocell Reslrton cpadtol1i

~~-- _ ~~__bull -l---~~u in Ohms Valuln I I

~~~I___rVUi~~k1~~~ ~ -~

LOR

52948

r Sehtmtuc Rf

Part Number

KOhms

COlor Group amp Color

AlR3 I R2 A4 AS RS R7 RS C2 Min

C3 MIX

1461171151531155149115515011551611165152116040011 1651 1155141

Note 1

C4 MInIMbullbull

155148

Z Blue 1511 111 2 I 10K 1 1800 1 A Black 1320 1510 10K 1500 195 BRed 212

C Yellow 243

D Green 870 1 999 I I 10K 1 1000 1 39lt I 68 I 2200 I 82K II 353 I 405 I 243 I 279

~~L White F Orange

760 869 3 1 _j60 169 369

Schematic Raf 01 1 02 PlrtNumber 152553 1152552

HF~Jjletal 200 HFE (Beta) 2OO3(lO

I-NOTE RtlR3 is sepaf1Jte insert board R1 vBliabte 65180 ohm Rjlllfiable 042 K ohms I I NOTE 2 Capacton C2 amp C3 are identJcm HaW same MinIMax vaiLlaquo

I II I I I II I I ~--1L---+1----I I 1+ II 1-1-----I

1----41-+--1 I I ~ 1--shy u __ i I I u H I --j--- --+--I~-----l

uS I H I

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 33: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

---

Cs__ I T M s

11lOR

11 Rt I~

S3 ~ Q2~1 R6 R22 ~----

Qt--~RSRS

C3== C2 = ~

52

54 J_ 8 --45V

C4 =shy

R4 R7

~ 00

FIG3middot23 SCHEMATIC TYPE 7

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 34: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

RI R3

o PHOTO CELL

TOP VIEW MOOUlE TYPE NO8

o

-8 Electronic Module Type 8

This Module is identical to Type 1 but bas two 3-24 [verything else is unchanged See inforshy-----

-

-

-

-

(2) TO 92 size plastic encased transistors (Fig mation on Type 1_

FIG3middot24

FLASH SOCKET

9 Electronic Module Type 9

Identical to Type 8 but has CS and R9 added (Fig 3-25) All other infonnation the same as Type 3 The addition of R9 makes this Module-

Type 9 - a 384 Shutter Modue

NOTE The magnet coil must be a 57 ohm model and the power source must be 3 loils

o PHOTO

29

o

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 35: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

10 Electronic Module Type 10 between R3 and Ql (Fig 3-26) All other inforshyThis Module is identical to Module Type 6 but

the physical position of R9 is changed to an area matlon is the same See Type 6

FLASH

o

FIG3-26 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 10

30

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 36: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-11 Electronic Module Type II

tor pad moJded on the reverse side of the RI R3 1his Module is another version of Module Type 6 resistor hl$ert board See Module Type 5 inforshy-with the only difference being the type and locashy mation for all other de[ails Part number for this tion of R9 (Fig )27) In fhls case R9 is a resis- RIR3 insett board is ~203gtf -

---

---

FLASH

R3

C2

C3

FIG 3middot27 TOP VI EW MODULE TY E NO 11-

---

31

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 37: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

12 Electronic Module Type 12 details see the manual referenced in Type 1 informiddot malion Flexible Otcuit (Fig 3w 29) Electrical This Module is another original - the 366 Shutter Values (Fig 3-30) and Schematic (Fig 3-31) type - (Fig 3-28) and is inltluded here only for drawings are providedcompleteness For an mechanical and eiectrical

FIG3middot28 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 12

FLASH pjN SHlko

iWIPE~ + -i POTtNTIOMt TER (wHEl-I ADDEO

FIG3middot29 BOTTOM VIEWTrYiipE112--------------------J

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 38: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

I I I I I I I I I I I

~ w

Schematic RM

Prt Number

Calor Group 8 Color

Z Blue

A Stack

B Red c Yeilow

0 Green e White F Oranoe

Schematic Aff

PIIu Number HfE (Seta) Range

Orange

Green Yellow

Whit_

Blue

Red

PhotOClllI

Vlu In LDR KOhml

15524 168041

1514 HAll 22K 1320 1amp14

1149 1320 33K 1000 1149 33K 870 1000 22K

759 870 12K 660 759 I2K

Trantitol$

01 l2 163071

20014001

100200

5011001

60100

100200

200400

FlG3middot30 ELECTRlel VALUES MRT NUMBERS TYPE~ RnislOll c-hor

Vlue In Ohms Vlu 1nM Cl

R2 A3 4 A6 Min Max

168042 16804 168044 16mm

27 22 120 33 2ll3 233 27 22 100 33 233 268 27 22 91 27 268 301 21 22 82 22 3Q7 363 27 22 sa 22 3 4 27 22 62 18 408 468 27 22 Sl 15 466 538

- --shy

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 39: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

LOR 01

w

Rl

M

22000 ~

33000S3 1200R5 R4 240R2

52 R3 220 +

--3V BCIT

FIG 3middot31 SCHEMATIC TYPE 12

51

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 40: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

-13 EJectronicModuleType 13

ient voltages which caused erratic operation of- lhis Module is identical to Type 12 except for electronic limen AJI other specifications includshythe addition of C2 OS microfarad electrically ing Schematic (Fig 3-34) and Electrical Values paraDel to the magnet cOil (Fig 1-34) Thi (Fig 3-30 are the same as Type I~ Part num- module change was made to suppress high trans- ber for C2 is 171599

-----

-

FIG3-32 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 13

--

-------

POTENTlOMpoundTpoundR (WHE AOtlpoundO

FIG3middot33 BOTTOM VI EW TYPE 13 3S

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 41: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

IIrL +

III

c

N~ N a a

N

d -l I shyN U

c Cgt

il N

ashy

0shyshy

c lltl -a

abull I g

N

Cgt If - IS w -ItO

u- ashy t u

~ w t ~ s

~-------------------~ 36

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 42: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--

14 poundIectronlc Module Type 14

1lm Module (Fig 3-35) is an Automatic Insert venion of the Type 12 Due to the automatic method of assembly the flexible circuit is changshyed (Fig 3-36) A new slightly varied Electrical

Value table (Fig 3-37) Was devised and tWo difshyferent photocells may be employed The Sche~ matico Parts numbers and aU other dNails arc identical to Type 11

-

-

0

-

4

lts9 CI freg ~ ~

~ ~

)

FIG3middot35 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 14

FLASH -

---

FIG3-35 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 14

PI SHIELO

37

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 43: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

w 00

flG331 elECTRICAL VALUES PAAT NUMBERS TVPE 14 --~ - ----shy

____ ~hc~~I___ ___ __ Rsi$10U I

-- ---shy --shy ____~J_u~J~QhL_____ ___ Y_lues in Microfarads

Value i Cl Schematic Ref lDR K Ohms R 2 R3 A4 A5 MlnMI

Part Numben 218841 16S041 168042 16jl043 16804_ lAAf171 6M4 Color Group Color

Z 81 1514 1140 22K 2 22 120 33K 2ll3 232

A Black 320 1514 24 22 100 33K 233 281 8 Rd 11bullbull9 1320 47K 2 22 91 27K 288 308 C Yellow 1000 1149 12K 2 22 middot2 22K 307 0 Green 810 1000 22K 24 22 66 22K 353 405 E White 159 870 12K 2 22 62 1fJK 406 4115 F OtatlQe 660 159 41K 2 22 51 15K 4 536

-

-shyTransitor-

SchematiC Ae 01 02

Part Numbert 163011 163072 Color eo

HFE (801 Range

QrJ

Glte 100122 Yellow 5O11(

White 50111

Blue 10022 -

Red 30014 Brown 20032d

i

-

I

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 44: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

- 15 Elelttroaic Module Typo 15

This ModWe is e_f1y the same as the Typo 14 same flexible circuit (FJI 3~39)~ Electrical Values - except for the addition of C2 OS microfarad eleetrically panlIeI to Ihe magnet coil (Fir 3-38) AU other details are the same as for Type 14 The

and Schematic are used (Note Shematic is the same as Type 13 wllh e2) Part number of C is 172599

---

o

- IG3-38 TOP VIEW MODULE TVPE NO 15

LASH socltET

Pl40TO etLL

FLASH PUt SHEL-D

FIG J 9 BOTTOM VIEW TYPE 15 39

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 45: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

16 EIelttronic Module Type 16

There is no current information on this Module (Fig 3-40) However it was manufactured preshyviously and may be encountered in the field If

so it can be considered as a Type 4 with R9 reshymoved and the LC in siJhdy clifTeren locatior Use the Electrical Value and Schematic for Type 4 and repair should prove uncomplicated

o o

o

Ie

PHOTO ClLL

Cl

FIG340 TOP VIEW MODULE TYPE NO 16

40

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 46: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

IV - TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

-This section is devoted exclusively to the troubleshyshooting repair and adaptation of Electronic Shutter Modules Consequently mechanical troubleshooting and repair infonnation will not be presented For in depth treatment of mechanimiddot - cal aspects of Shutter operation including trouble investipting see the Manual on Automatic Shutter operation published in May 1968

A TESTING

1 Resistors and Capacitors - Looking at the top of the module the various components are easily identified by shapes andl or color markings Resistors are long tubular deshyvices with four (4) colored stripes around the body capacitors are of two types one is similar to the resistor shape but has only 2 colors or less

- stripes and may have one end rounded the other is a flat disc5haped type usually mounted vertically

3 Testing Resistors

Because resistors may be and usuaUy are electrishycally in parallel it is necessary to unsolder one lead from the module in order to test it (Fig 4-1)

--- shy CAPACITOR

41

Place [he test leads of an ohmmeter set at the proper scale on each end of the resistor The meter should register the approximate resistance of the component being measured If the meter needle fails to move the resistor is no good and must be replaced Similarly if the needle registers zero and remains there the resistor may be shortshyed To decide positively chan~ the meter scales zeroing the needle for each range and retest If the result is still a meter reading of zero replace the resistor in question

b Testing Capacitors

Capacitors may be checked in a similar manner Unsolder either lead from the module place the probes of an ohmmeter set at any scale on each lead of the capacitor The meter needle will de-shyflect slightly and then slowly start to drop back this shows that the capacitor has been charged Reverse the probes on the capacitor leads Now the meter needle must deflect fully and then drop back this indicates capacitor discharge The preshyvious sequence is nonnal and usuaUy shows a good component If the needle deflects and remains on zero the capacitor is shorted and must be re-shyplaced If the needle does not move at aU the capacitor is open and also must be replaced

2 Replacing Resistors and Capacitors

To replace any component soldered into the module the solder must be removed with a vacuum type soldering iron - a so-called solder gobbler this is necessary to avoid damaging the flexible circuit When replacing a part trim and bend the new leads to match those of the part removed and insert the leads into the same tenninal hole from which the old component was removed Solder the new component in place

3 Testing Transistors

Transistors are of several types color coded as previously explained in the Electrical Values tables - generally identifiable by the three (3) lead configuration - Emitter-Base-Collector (E-B-C) The PhotoceU is unique and therefore identification is no problem as in the Integrated Grcuit (Ie)

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 47: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

Leads do not have to be unsoldered in order to tt$t Tranmtors Refer to the appropriate drawshying for the solder points on the underside of the modute Locate the emitter t base and collector leads Set an ohmmeter to the RXI K scale and pia the pltgtsitlve (+) probe on the collector (0 and the neptive (-) probe on the emitter (E) Place a nat~bJade screwdriver tip across the posishytion probe and the transitor base (BUFig 4-2) The tnmsistor should switch ON causing meter needle movement Ifno needle motion~ repJace the transistor

4 Testing Integrated CimIits (IC)

A method similar to the transistor test described above is used to test Integrated Orcuits on a G()NO GO basis only ThIs system wiH detennine that the LC is operating See Fig 4-3 and proceed as follows connect the power fmm a 3 volt batshytery ~ or other direct current 3V (DC) source to the solder connections (Fig 3-13) on the undershyside of the module Observe the proper polarity the positive lead from the battery must be COrr nected to pin 3 and the negative must be connectshyed to pin 4 of the Le To simulate an operational signal use an ohmmeter set the scale to RXI K and use the ohmmeter leads as illustrated the positive lead using a pin type probe placed on the Input pin 2 and the negative lead placed On the Output pin I Observe thai the ohmmeter needle deflects and continues to move slowly J( the needle does not deflect the Ie is inoperative and muIIt be replaced If the needle deflects Cull scale aod remains at zero the Ie is shorted and must be replaced

EMITTER

B INTERCHANGING MODULES Since all of the Electronic Modules used in the Camera systems are an outgrowth of the original 362 Shutter Module Type 1 it follows that sli~t changes slbstitutions or deletions may alter one configuration to another Data on substitushytion possibilities will be provided in the fonn of a Table (Fig 4-4) Study of the Table wiH reveal exactly how to change one Module into another

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 48: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--------

--

---

Iii - ci u

43

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 49: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

--FIG 4-4middot

MaduieTy

TFlOm

Type 2Type 1

Typel

Type 7

Type 8

Type 9

Type 1Type 2

Type 3

Type 7

TypeS

TypeQ

Type 3 Type 1

Typa2

T1

TypoS

Type6 ltTypeS

SUBSJlTUTIONTABLE SUBSTITUTION TABLE

MIthod To e ud To I

NO11f Fint tHIIIJ(t firlaquoII ElettritIiI Vaullir bull __ by

emnptIIringTIbhI$~ Type lanbti~fO Type2ete only fu_ fIw_ Add C5 1Il6 m_adl eIecricaIlV _lei m 1M E_ COIl Refw to the underJWe dTwwing of Type 2 for solder c0nnecshy

tion of C5

Add C5 Illllbove p1U$ RS 39 ohms etoctricallV ~Iet to R3 A to thI underside dnawing of Type 3 for ~dIrClO~ of C5 and Re ChartgII fTIIUI to 57 ohms eh brtWy to 3 wtt type

R _ClfTomIMTypel-lo Adela

CI1ange __mIM____bull

Change b1hSistolt III -etfied ebove and IhIb Idd C5 R9 ___bull Qonge tht e_ coli m 51 ohm IV CMngIi battery 10 3 volt type

RerIIOW CS

Add R9 39 ohmt electrically JMIlIIlei to R3 Refer to the undermiddot aide flexlble einult drtwing far JDIdIr con~ to RS

Remove Cl4itor C1 from Type 2

Chenoa bOth t8l1Ntors to tbamp JMstic encapIIUiIted dIiety

Change tt8Niston bull described above far type 8 and alto IIIdd R9 described ebove for Type 3 Chmp thiI ~ coli 10 a 57 ohm tYpe Use only 3V powar

Remove C5 Ind R9 Change magnet to 901l type and battery 10 45 voits

Amow R9 Change trlIgfI8t to 90Sl type and blttery 11) 45 volts

Remove RS C1 Change magnet to 901ltypt and bIItbWy to 4$ -em

RII1iOyen4J C6 and RS and change trantmDh if ~ to the plastic type Change magnet to 90 ohm ceNt Uwith 4SV

Add R9 39 ohmbullbull between the emitter of Cl2 thlbmery negative connection Refer to the undenide- f1exibfa circuit drawing of Type 6 R9 is j)Olitioned ph(licaUy in the diagOnSl between C4 (-1 and 02 Add C6 bullbull05 micrahrad perallel to the coil of ttMt magnet See unckrrsidamp flexible circuit drIwing Type 2 Afm re(llll 57 Ohm magnefand 3 VOlt fOUne

44

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 50: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

- FIG 4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE (CONTO) Modu Type SUIJSTlTUnON TABLE

- From To Method To Ik Uttd To I - TyS- 5 tcontdl

-- TypaS

- Type 7

-----

-Type 8

-

-Type 9

Typo to

TVPl 5

Type 1

TYP2

Type 3

Type 8

Tvpe 9

Type 3

T 9

Type 1

Type 2

middotType 1

TypeS

Add As 39 ohms parallel to R3 and C5 J)trallel to the ml9t coil EX1cUyu for TyPl 6 exoept for physicallocatfon of R9 on tite board In this moduJe R9 is between 01 and R3 Other inshystfueti(lnt see Ty- 6

Remove R9 and C5 from Type 6 Chfngt magnet and b8Uery lU Rmove C5 and Add Cl between (he negathle P C connectIon artd R3 neptive See undenide tlmble circuit drawing of TyPl

Add Cl IUbow

Add Cl as tM Type 2 abow and add R9 39 ohms ehtetrlcally pnile to R3 Refer to th4 topside drawing of Type 3 for the ptWs1callocation on the board of R9 and Ct and to the undel$me fkudble cinuit drawing for the solder CQnnections This modole operate1i only with a magnet ooil of 57 ohms resistante sO the magnet mUllbe be changed

CAUTION TheN chiItn9a requi a 3 yenOIt power wmm DO NOT lIM 45 volts

Add Cl as abow and eM both transistors to the plastiC encap $Ilated type

Add Cl and R9 as instrUcted above Change traMinon as f()l Type 8 change electromagnet and obWfve CAUTlON note abow [Type 3)

Follow exactly the $lime l70cedure 8l given in the Type 7 to Type 3 convenion eXtlPt that C1 illnthls module and does oot have to be dded Again obsene the CAUTlON notice

The only dfHerenm bftWfJen Type 3 and Type 9 is the tramiltors Both modules empJoy plastic encapsulated transistors but Type 3 has one si1 and Type 9 has another These transistors- are exshychangeable one for the other and mllY occesionaUy be found f()

gether on tM same module

Remove C5 and R9 Change magnet ooil to 90 ohms Use 45 volt battefy system

Remove R9 Change magnet ooil asor Type 1

Remove Cl and R9 Change mtgrult coil and ~ supply as ootid allogtee

Same as for Type 1

45

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 51: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

FIG4-4 SUBSTITUTION TABLE ICONTO)

SUBSTITUTION TABLE

ModuIoT

Itwd To a UHd To I~ 1 1Mbull T

Type 6 _CS R9 ~ Bto90_tvllO UM 45 wit power wppty

Type 10

Type 11 TypeS Same IS for Type1) to Type S eem Rot ell4lllrt tMttM 11 R3 InteI1 boanf rrampIIt alto be changIJd 1D tN orionw part without 119_

Type Type 13 Add C2 tltCtriwlty in PQlIeI to Int coil

Type 14 Type1S Add C2 electrictty in to IIt coil

46

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47

Page 52: Polaroid Repair Electronic Modules-300 Automatic Shutters-1972

- C PARTS INFORMATION

I Parts In Stock At - Polaroid CJunlaquoa Repair Headquarl 89 Serond A - WaIham M

- Par Numbers EIelttronic Mou_tina Blocks (Modules) 224230 271018 252175

Photocells 155249 278841

Tntnsistors 152553 152552 163071 163072 - CapadlOOl 155145 155146 155148

_10t1I 155149 155150 155151 155152 155153- 160408 220334 168041 168042 168043 168044 168077 146777

Ited Circuit 251452 -- 211111amp and Aampwmblies No Longer Stoclted

PartNbers U- poundlectronic Modules 153309 224230 252174 271018 155599 224230 155549 252175 -

Photocells 224922 278841 - Transistors 270766 152553 270767 152552

- Capacitors 155147 155146 270629 Commercial Equivalent (e5)

Resistors 252769-Ited Cirallt 252934 251452

---

47